2010 Chrysler PT Cruiser Owner's Manual Owners OM 3rd

User Manual: 2010 Chrysler PT Cruiser Owners Manual Troubleshoot 2010 Chrysler PT Cruiser |

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 368

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2010
OWNER’ S MANUAL

PT Cruiser

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number

.............. 6

䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.

INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.

Vehicle Identification Number

INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

䡵 Sentry Key威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

▫ Locking Doors With a Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ Sentry Key威 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 14

䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18

▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . 14

▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . 14

▫ To Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 19

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

䡵 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 20

▫ Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 21

▫ Rear Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . 22

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

▫ Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 䡵 Liftgate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

▫ To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . 23 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 25

▫ Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Child Protection Door Lock System — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 44

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 52
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 72
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.

Three Button Vehicle Key

Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift
lever knob pushbutton has returned to the outward
position. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position,
push the key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the
LOCK position, and remove the key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.

WARNING!

Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON
4 — START

NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors with a Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the
key forward. For door lock lubrication, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction and the key
is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the the right or left to disengage the lock.
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
Entry (RKE) will not function.
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System does not need to be
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it. armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless if the vehicle is locked or unlocked. During
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System —
normal operation, the Vehicle Security Light will come on
If Equipped
for three seconds immediately after the ignition switch is
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
turned on for a bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob pushbutton
remains on, this indicates a problem with the electronics.
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
depressed.
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
SENTRY KEY姞 — IF EQUIPPED
being shut off after two seconds of running.
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine. Keep in mind that an unprogrammed key is also considThe system will shut the engine off after two seconds of ered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This cylinder for that vehicle.
system utilizes ignition keys, which have an electronic If the Vehicle Security Light comes on during normal
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that vehicle operation (when the vehicle has been running for
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
of security protection.
This PIN is required for replacement of keys by an
All of the keys provided with a new vehicle have been authorized dealer. Duplication of keys must be perprogrammed to that vehicle’s electronics.
formed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
Replacement Keys
blank key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
authorized dealer.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
off.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
The new Sentry Key威 has been programmed. The Rethe ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
programmed during this procedure. Repeat this proceignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
dure to program up to a total of eight keys. If you do not
key.
have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your autho3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. rized dealer for details.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sysaddition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
Sentry Key姞 Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following procedure:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro- If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm, it signal
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the autho- for about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes the horn
rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed. will sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and
the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash. Then
General Information
the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is If the disturbance that triggered the alarm is no longer
present (doors, liftgate, ignition switch), the alarm will
subject to the following conditions:
continue to sound until three minutes of alarm time is
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
reached.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
To Set the Alarm
received, including interference that may cause undes1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
ired operation.
of the vehicle.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate, 2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch,
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation. The or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, and close
Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible all doors.
signals when activated.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a Security System Manual Override
door is opened, the ignition switch is turned ON, or the The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
power door locks are unlocked by either the power door doors using the manual door lock plunger.
lock switch or the RKE transmitter, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will automatically disarm. After 16 seconds, the
Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly. This shows that
the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed.
To Disarm the Alarm
Unlock a front door using the RKE transmitter.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key威 will disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm. A valid key is one that is
programmed to that particular vehicle. A valid key will
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. An invalid key will
trigger the alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds three times when you unlock a front
door using the RKE transmitter, the alarm has been
activated. Check the vehicle for tampering.

Door Lock Plunger

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice
to unlock all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK
button is pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate and
the parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. For

Three Button Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

EVIC-equipped vehicles refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. For non-EVICequipped vehicles, perform the following steps:

Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
RKE transmitter.
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
hold the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to If desired, the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. For EVIC-equipped vehicles, refer to
indicate that this feature has changed.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE trans- further information. For non-EVIC-equipped vehicles,
perform the following steps:
mitter.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- 1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds), 3. Test the “Flash Lights with Lock” feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position,
The “Sound Horn on Lock” feature can be reactivated by
and the key removed.
repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitTo Turn Off “Flash Lights with Lock”
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
NOTE: The “Flash Lights with Lock” feature can be Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
turned on or off. For EVIC-equipped vehicles refer to will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
The “Flash Lights on Lock” features can be reactivated by
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
repeating this procedure.
further information. For non-EVIC-equipped vehicles,
Panic Alarm
perform the following steps:
The Panic Alarm mode flashes the park lights, and
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
sounds the horn for about three minutes or until the
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four alarm is turned off.
seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

total of eight RKE transmitters can be programmed to
your vehicle through the use of a currently-programmed
RKE transmitter.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional EVIC in
the instrument cluster, the RKE transmitters may also be
programmed through the EVIC display.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Use the following procedure to program additional RKE
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
transmitters if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
Key威:
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
NOTE: When entering program mode using currentlythe PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
programmed RKE transmitter, all other programmed
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)
transmitters will be erased and you will have to repronoises of the system.
gram them for your vehicle.
To Program Additional Transmitters
1. Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the
Each vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant with two
vehicle, including any transmitters that are currently
RKE transmitters programmed only for that vehicle. A
programmed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

9. Using the RKE transmitter to be programmed, press
and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons,
3. Fasten your seatbelt. (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
simultaneously.
any chimes that may confuse you during this program10. A single chime will be heard.
ming procedure.)
2. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.

4. Place the key into the ignition.

11. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

5. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
12. A single chime will be heard.

6. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE 13. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional RKE transmitters.
transmitter.
7. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds, 14. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
also press the PANIC button within six seconds.
15. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to
8. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons. 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard.
The chime is an indication that you have successfully After 60 seconds, all programmed RKE transmitters
entered program mode. All RKE transmitters that are to function normally.
be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed RKE transwhen the chime was heard.
mitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and distance, check for these two conditions:
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
following conditions:
the battery is a minimum of three years.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
• This device must accept any interference received, tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
including interference that may cause undesired
Transmitter Battery Replacement
operation.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key
is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

Separating RKE Transmitter Halves

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors while you drive,
when you park, and when leaving the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
Door Lock Plunger

CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks
Auto Lock — If Equipped
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
either switch to lock or unlock the doors.
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
5. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.

Power Door Lock Switch

The Auto Lock feature can be enabled or disabled. refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto Lock 3. The shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
can be enabled or disabled by performing the following
4. The driver door is opened.
procedure:
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON, and
back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
position.
If Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors.
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the further information.
programming.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
Auto Unlock — If Equipped
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with the following procedure:
power door locks if:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON, and
2. The shift lever was in gear and the vehicle speed back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the
doors.
4. Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle.
NOTE: Use the Auto Lock and Auto Unlock features in
accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock System — If
Equipped
To provide a safer environment for children riding in a
rear seat, the rear doors have the Child Protection Door
Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and move the
control up to engage. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.

Child Lock Control

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child Door Protection
Lock is engaged.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (UNLOCKED position), roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.

POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the instrument panel above the radio. The top left switch controls
the left front window and the top right switch controls
the right front window.
The lower left switch controls the left rear window and
the lower right switch controls the right rear window.
The window lock switch is located between the window
switches, that allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located at the back of the center floor
console.

Power Window Switches

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Rear Window Switches
There are also rear passenger window switches located at
the rear of the center console.

Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s and passenger’s front window switches
have an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch
past the detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. Press the switch a second time in either
direction to stop the window.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.

Power Rear Window Switches

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of touch pad located on the backside of the liftgate handle,
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked by pressing twice on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter button or by
activating the power door lock switches located on the
front doors.

Liftgate Handle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at HIGH
speed. DO NOT use the RECIRCULATION mode.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) — if
equipped

• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera- • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped

Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.

WARNING!

NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
collision.
far away from home or on your own street.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can best take the forces of a collision.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

Latch Plate

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Removing Slack From Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).

Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. the rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
allow the belt to retract fully.
NOTE:
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.

WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your authorized dealer for service. Failure
to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.

Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push up or down on the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that fits you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
the entire belt is extracted.
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will worn snugly and positioned properly.
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Renow in the Automatic Locking Mode.
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it deployed airbag, must be replaced immediately.
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
(BeltAlert姞)
locking mode.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s or passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

NOTE:
• BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer.
• Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.

If BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat belt
For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your
remains unfastened.
vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The
BeltAlert威 warning system is not activated when the Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威 warn- We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
ing system may be triggered when an animal or heavy throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is the best way to keep the baby safe.
folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
stowed.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbag
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.

Front Airbag Components
1 — Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
2 — Knee Bolster

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.

NOTE:
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
but they will open during airbag deployment.
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Airbag System Components
• Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
system components:
• Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Weight Sensors
• Airbag Warning Light
Advanced Front Airbag Features
• Steering Wheel and Column
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
• Instrument Panel
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
• Knee Impact Bolster
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
and Seat Track Position Sensors

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the airbag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.

Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag
deploys independently, that is a left side impact may
deploy the left airbag only and a right-side impact may
deploy only the right airbag.

WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints”) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.

The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.

If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
Assistance⬙ for further information.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.

Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Airbags — if equipped, and front seat
belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required, depending
on the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position,
in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light and PAD indicator light in the instrument panel for six to eight seconds for a
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
self-check when the ignition is first turned on.
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have off. The PAD indicator light will function normally. (Refer
deployed.
to ⬙Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙.) If
the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system,
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
comes on again after initial startup.
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrucollision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Differalso record the nature of the malfunction.
ent airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
WARNING!
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru- separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
away by an authorized dealer.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
The (PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located in the
center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front
passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off.
The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR
BAG OFF⬙ to show that the front passenger airbag will
not inflate during a collision requiring airbag deployment. When the right front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat, the
passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD
indicator light is not illuminated.

Passenger Airbag Disabled Light

The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly
seated in the front passenger seat. In this case,
the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision
requiring an airbag occurs.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is
turned off and will not inflate.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in
an appropriate child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to a child in a rear-facing infant seat.
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger
Indicator
Airbag
Light
Status
Adult
OFF
ON
Child
ON
OFF
Grocery Bags, Heavy
Briefcases and Other
ON
OFF
Relatively Light Objects
Empty or Very Light
OFF*
OFF
Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light ON.

Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seatback
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If there is a fault present in the Airbag system, the Airbag
Warning Light (a red light located in the center of the
instrument cluster directly in front of the driver) will be
turned on. This indicates that you should have an authorized dealer service the system immediately. The Airbag
Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that
can affect the operation of the airbag system. If there is a
fault present in the PAD Indicator Light, the Airbag
Warning Light remains illuminated to show that the
passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared. If
an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with
operation of the weight sensors, a fault will occur which
turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag
Warning Light. Once the lodged object is removed, the
fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of
time.

the measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the ORC. The ORC uses the
occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off. It also determines the
rate of airbag inflation during a collision.
Weight Sensors
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
The (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. collision.
The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The side
airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.

Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.

floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.

If a Deployment Occurs
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the airbag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrastructions for cleaning.
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have depassenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.

Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the approximate six to eight-second interval.
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either highspeed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.

NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:

1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Vehicle speed
• Engine RPM
• Brake switch status

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Pedal position
• And other parameters
configuration

WARNING!
depending

vehicle

Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.

Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
Infants and Small Children
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
children from newborn size to the child almost large
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.

infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.

WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.

• This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car • Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
child restraint anchorage system.
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.

restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.

If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, please refer to
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR).
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
weight and height limits.
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
not work when you need it.
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
switched to an Automatic Locking Mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.

retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion
around the child restraint. Follow the instructions of the
child restraint manufacture.

NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
have lower and tether anchorages that are capable of
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having
retractor until there is enough to pass it through the child
flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then
seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in
pull on the belt until it is fully extended from the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating
positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use
the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to “Installing the Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.

LATCH Anchors

Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
most older vehicles.
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
passenger-carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
restraint systems having attachments for those anchoryour child unattended in the vehicle.
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also Installing the Child Restraint System
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
of all of the available attachments provided with your manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
child restraint in any vehicle.
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
the tension in the strap.
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages. The
tether strap should be routed under the center of the head
restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of
the seatback. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.

Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCHcompatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat
belts.

WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.

Tether Strap Mounting

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
their back.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the SAFETY TIPS
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detriNEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
mental and should be avoided.
AREA.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
WARNING!
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
cause serious injury or death.
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriA new engine may consume some oil during its first few
ously injured or killed.
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
considered a normal part of the break-in and not intervehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
preted as an indication of difficulty.
belts.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the comareas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
out of the area.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authofor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
rized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Seat Belts
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
inoperable.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Floor Mat Safety Information
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
Airbag Warning Light
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight ways.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle

Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.

Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 84
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Front Seat Adjustment — If Equipped . . . . . . . 85

▫ Six-Way Power Seat With Manual Recliner —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped . . 88
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Tumbling Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
▫ Rear Seat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
䡵 Emergency Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

䡵 Lights

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 101

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 112
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 104
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ To Set a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills . . . . 114

▫ Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin . . . . . . 126

䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 115

▫ Storage Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 119 䡵 Rear Shelf Panel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Position 1 (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Position 2 (Middle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Position 3 (Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

▫ Position 4 (Vertical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Express-Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

▫ Position 5 (Table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.

(Left), O (Center) or R (Right) position. After selecting the
mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the
mirror to move. Use the O (Center) position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located to the left of the
steering column on the instrument panel. To adjust the
view in the outside mirrors, turn the rotary knob to the L

Power Mirror Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an illuminated • The driver vanity mirror will become inoperable when
vanity mirror located on the sun visor. To use the mirror,
the vehicle alarm is enabled.
rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover
• The passenger vanity mirror will become inoperable if
upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the
left on for more than 10 minutes.
mirror cover turns off the lights.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors are designed to slide outward along the
support shaft to provide extended coverage of the windshield and door glass.
1. Rotate the sun visor downward.
2. Pull the visor forward to remove if from the swivel
clip.
3. Slide the visor outwards along the shaft to the desired
position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror

To store the sun visor to its original position, reverse the
above process.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.

WARNING!
• DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Front Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat to the
desired position.

Manual Adjusting Bar

Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Power Seat Switch

This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to
Six-Way Power Seat With Manual Recliner — If
the rear of the power seat switch. To recline, lean forward
Equipped
The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near slightly before lifting the lever, then lean back to the
the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or down, desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and
lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position.
forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Recliner Control Lever

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment is located on the inboard side of
the driver’s seatback. To increase support, rotate the
handle down.
Lumbar Adjust Handle

Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to
provide additional cargo space.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To fold the seat forward, pull up on the recliner lever above the top of your ear. To raise a head restraint, pull
up on the head restraint. To lower a head restraint, push
located on the outboard side of the seat.
in the button that is part of the head restraint rod guide,
and push down on the head restraint.

Folding Seat Control Lever

Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. Adjust the height of a head restraint to
a position that the top of the head restraint is located

Head Restraint Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion
and seatback. The driver and front passenger seats are
heated. The controls for each heater are located near the
bottom center of the instrument panel.

an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation. If
Low-level heating is selected, the system automatically
turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation.

light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation. It will
turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after

(Continued)

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High, within two to five minutes.
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
WARNING!
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
Press the switch once to select High-level heatbecause of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exLow-level heating. Press the switch a third time
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
to shut Off the heating elements.
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
If High-level heating is selected, the system automatically
long periods of time.
switches to Low-level heating and turns one indicator

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.

CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.

Folding Rear Seat Button

When returning the seatback to its upright position,
make sure that the seatback latch is engaged. You should
Folding Rear Seat
not be able to fold the seatback forward unless the release
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can button is pressed or the emergency release handle is
be folded forward. To fold down either seatback, push pulled. Do not allow passengers to ride in a rear seat if
the button that is located on the top of the seatback near the seatback latch is not engaged.
the outboard side, and push or pull the seatback forward.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Do not ride in any of the rear seating positions
when one or more of the seat latches is not
engaged. Riding with the seat latches disengaged
could result in serious or fatal injury.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.

NOTE:
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt appears to be
locked into place, check to verify that the seatback is
fully latched.
• If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center
lap/shoulder belt still does not operate properly, check
and see if the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
system is activated. Refer to “Occupant Restraints/
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the seatback is in the
fully upright and locked position when occupied. If
the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and
the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, the vehicle should immediately be
taken to an authorized dealer for service. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.

Tumbling Rear Seat
To provide additional storage in the cargo area, each rear
seat can be tumbled forward.

CAUTION!
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold 2. Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of
down the rear seatback.
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.

Folding Rear Seat Button

Tumbling Seat Release Strap

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Attach the tether, located at the base of the seat When returning the seatback to its upright position,
cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to make sure that the seat latches are engaged. You should
not be able to fold the seatback forward and/or tumble
hold the seat in place.
the seat unless the release button is pressed, the emergency release handle is pulled and/or the tumbling seat
release strap is pulled. Do not allow passengers to ride in
a rear seat if one or more of the seat latches is not
engaged.

WARNING!
Do not ride in any of the rear seating positions when
one or more of the seat latches is not engaged. Riding
with the seat latches disengaged could result in
serious or fatal injury.
Tumbling Seat Tether

NOTE: The tumbling seat tether should be clipped onto
To return the rear seat to its upright latched position, the elastic strap provided on the base of the seat cushion
rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat. Then before returning the seat to its normal position.
lift the seatback to its upright latched position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of
Rear Seat Removal
The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
space.
1. Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.

Tumbling Seat Release Strap

Folding Rear Seat Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the NOTE: Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat
floor attachments.
and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved
when removed from the vehicle.
To reinstall the rear seat, insert the seat into the floor
attachments. Lower the release levers of the seat to latch
the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward
to latch the seat. Lift the seatback to its upright latched
position.

WARNING!

Release Lever Location

4. Using the handle on the seat, the seat assembly can
now be lifted and removed from the vehicle.

In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

EMERGENCY SEATBACK RELEASE

WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate
area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 (Top) or
position 2 (Middle), either by climbing into the
liftgate from outside, or through the inside of the
vehicle. Always close the liftgate when your vehicle
is unattended. Once in the liftgate area, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the liftgate,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.

glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the left rear seatback
latching mechanism. Refer to “Cargo Area Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.

As a security measure, a Seatback Emergency Release
lever is built into the left side rear seatback latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
Emergency Seatback Release
inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in
position 1 (Top) or position 2 (Middle), the left side rear Once unlatched the seatback can be pushed forward to
seatback can be unlatched by pulling down on the gain access into the interior of the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Make sure that the elastic loop is around the
emergency release handle at all times. If the handle is
pulled downward, entirely through the elastic loop, the
handle will not return to its original position and the
seatback may not operate properly.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever

100

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Move the safety latch, located under the front edge of
the hood, slightly to the right of center and raise the hood.

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Safety Latch

Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver’s side of the
engine compartment to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the hood prop at the location stamped into
the inner hood surface.

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

101

LIGHTS

Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
Multifunction Lever
for parking lights and instrument panel lights. Turn to
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
the second detent for headlight operation.
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.

Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever

102

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights, Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
down.
NOTE: If the driver’s door is left open, and the head- Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
lights or parking lights are left on, a chime will sound. detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
is opened.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Dimmer Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

103

High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beams. Pull the lever toward you
to switch the headlights back to low beams.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
until the lever is released.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is in the multifunction
Fog Light Operation
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking or low beam headlights and pull out the NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
end of the lever.
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

104

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for
more than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.

Turn Signal Operation

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at lower intensity
whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the
headlight switch is off, the parking brake is released and
the shift lever is in any position except PARK.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

105

NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights will turn off
automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn
on again when the turn signal is not operating.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.

Map Reading Lights

NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. These lights will automatically shut off 10 minutes after the ignition is OFF. Further
use of the lights, without starting the vehicle, will provide 90 seconds of activity prior to automatic shut off.

106

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”.

Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for
low-speed wiper operation.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Front Wiper Control

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.

CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch
is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)

107

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
park position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the
park position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.

108

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval.

Front Wiper Control

There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles every
second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles at vehicles speeds below 10 mph
(16 km/h), or from a minimum of one cycle every second

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

109

to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h). the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three
wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
WARNING!
delay times will be doubled.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
Windshield Washers
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
washer spray is desired.
windshield with the defroster before and during
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in windshield washer use.
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

110

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mist Feature
Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer control lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.

Headlights With Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF
if they were turned ON by this feature.
The “Headlights with Wipers” feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Mist Control

TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Pull up on the
lever to lock the column firmly in place.

Tilt Steering Lever

111

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.

112

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at approximately either 30 mph
(40 km/h ) or 35 mph (56 km/h) depending on the model
or engine size. The Electronic Speed Control lever is
located on the right side of the steering wheel.

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE
indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.

Electronic Speed Control Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.

113

To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward CANCEL, or normal brake
or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning
off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory.

To Resume Speed
To Set a Desired Speed
To resume a previously set speed, pull the RESUME
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pull
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary the Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
When the Electronic Speed Control is ON, speed can be
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
increased by pulling up and holding RESUME ACCEL.
While in the AutoStick威 mode, Electronic Speed Control Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
the new speed will be set.
will only operate in 3rd and 4th gear.

114

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 2 mph Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
(3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
moderate hills is normal.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is ON,
Vehicles equipped with four-speed automatic transaxles
pull down and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when
may experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing
the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd
set.
gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
speed decreases.
Control.
To Accelerate for Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

115

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handHomeLink威 Buttons
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
NOTE:
HomeLink威
is disabled when the Vehicle Secudoor openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
rity
Alarm
is
active.
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.

116

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.

Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
Begin Programming
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

117

Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away • After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the gakeeping the indicator light in view.
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
System.”
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and handheld transmitter buttons.
and observe the indicator light.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
open and close while you train.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
NOTE:
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro• Some gate operators and garage door openers may gramming A Rolling Code System.”
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.

118

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Using HomeLink威
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.

119

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink威 Button
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
follow these steps:
door or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programtransmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

120

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica- Troubleshooting Tips
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
at this time.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
General Information
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
erased.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when two conditions:
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

121

2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

Power Sunroof Switch

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position, press
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof.
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp. The sunroof can be stopped at any position between
closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the switch
rearward will activate the Express-Open feature, causing
the sunroof to open automatically.

122

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
any position between closed and full vent. To close the the sunroof is open.
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
WARNING!
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unatExpress-Open Feature
tended children, can become entrapped by the
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
injury or death.
switch rearward will activate the Express Open feature.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
passengers are properly secured too.
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

123

Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
A standard 12 volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in
the front of the center floor console.

Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Front Power Outlet

124

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

This outlet will accept a cigar lighter unit, which is part of
the optional Smokers Package. To preserve the heating
element of the cigar lighter unit, do not hold the lighter in
the heating position. As a child safety precaution, this
power outlet is powered by the ignition switch, only
when the switch is in the ON or ACC position.
NOTE:
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
Rear Power Outlet
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
NOTE: The rear power outlet will not accept a cigar
need to be replaced.
lighter unit as it is intended only for accessory items.
There is one optional power outlet located in the right
Both the front and rear power outlets include tethered
rear cargo area.
caps that are labeled with a key symbol or battery
symbol, indicating the power source.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

125

WARNING!

CAUTION!

To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

126

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

STORAGE
Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin
The center console provides a sliding armrest with two
storage compartments under the lid.

Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
the upper cover.

Upper Storage Button
Sliding Armrest

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

127

Inside is an area to store a cellular phone and other Push the lower button on the front of the armrest, and
miscellaneous items.
raise the armrest for access to the lower storage bin.

Upper Storage Bin

Lower Storage Button

128

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The lower storage area can be used for storing up to six
compact discs (CDs) and other miscellaneous items.

CONSOLE FEATURES
The console has two front cupholders, a removable coin
holder, 12 Volt power outlet and a front storage tray.
There are three additional cupholders; one is molded in
the center of the console to hold large cups, and the
others are in the rear of the console to serve passengers in
the rear seat. The floor console power outlet will also
operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).

CAUTION!

Lower Storage Bin

Storage Pockets
There are storage pockets located on each door trim
panel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
REAR SHELF PANEL — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Shelf Panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo
area. The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five
different positions.

129

NOTE: The liftgate may be opened or closed with the
rear cargo shelf panel in position 1, position 2, position 3
or position 4.

WARNING!
• To avoid tipping, lock the shelf securely in all
positions.
• Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open, or
use the shelf as a seat.
• Failure to follow these warnings could result in
serious or fatal injury.

130

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Position 1 (Top)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the top guides and slide forward. Press down on the back
of the shelf panel to lock it into place.

WARNING!
Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 (top). In
an accident, objects could strike occupants causing
serious or fatal injury.
Position 2 (Middle)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the middle guides and slide forward. Press down on the
back of the shelf panel to lock it into place.

Rear Shelf Panel Position 1

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

131

WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 2
(middle). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
Position 3 (Floor)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the bottom guides and slide forward.

Rear Shelf Panel Position 2

NOTE: To carry items that may soil the carpeting, the
rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position
3.

132

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Position 4 (Vertical)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the
floor and slide downward. Push the shelf panel forward
to lock it by aligning the vertical guide with the rubber
stop of the shelf panel.

WARNING!
When in the vertical position, the rear shelf panel
should not be used as a barrier for large objects in the
cargo area with the seatbacks folded down. In an
accident objects could strike the seatbacks or occupants causing serious or fatal injury.
Position 5 (Table)
With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved
rearward to act as a serving counter.
1. Align the front corners of the shelf panels with the lock
position on the backside of the top rear guides. Press
down on the shelf panel to lock it into place.

Rear Shelf Panel Position 4

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

133

2. Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and
lower the shelf leg.

Rear Shelf Panel Position 5
Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob

3. Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as
labeled on the rear scuff plate.

WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 5
(table). Failure to follow this warning could cause the
shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.

134

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
right side of the steering column.

Rotate the switch upward to the “on” position will
activate the rear wiper.
Rotate the switch upward to the “washer” position
will activate that rear washer. The washer pump
will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring
is engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle three
times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the on
position.
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
the blade cannot return to the park position, damage to the rear wiper motor may occur.

135

Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.

136

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ To Reset The Display . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . .

(EVIC) –
. . . . . . . . 159
. . . . . . . . 160
. . . . . . . . 161
. . . . . . . . 161

▫ Compass Mini-Trip Computer Reset Button . . 155

▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . 156

▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

▫ Odometer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

138

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single-Disc)
Radio With Optional Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) And Uconnect™ Phone
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 169
▫ Operating Instructions — CD Mode . . . . . . . 172
▫ Operating Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . 174

▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . 175
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode In REF, And RAQ, Radios . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . 178
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

139

▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 180

▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

▫ Climate Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

140

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4

— Air Vent
— Instrument Cluster
— Analog Clock
— Assist Handle

5
6
7
8

—
—
—
—

Glove Compartment
Power Windows
Radio
Climate Controls

9 — Storage Cubby
10 — Lower Switch Bank
11 — Side Mirror Control *
* If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

141

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

142

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on
the front passenger’s (right) side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

143

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.

144

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
5. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.

6. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
7. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.

145

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.

146

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
8. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer button” for additional
information.

NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

147

Vehicle Odometer Messages
gASCAP Message
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
messages will display in the odometer:
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
words “gASCAP” will display in the odometer display
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar area. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar press the odometer reset button to turn off the message.
LoW TirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure If the problem continues, the message will appear the
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault next time the vehicle is started.
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Cluster, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) for further information.

may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and
LoW TirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three Vehicle”.
cycles.

148

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
9. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
Control system is ON.
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
NOTE: The word “SET” will not illuminate when the
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
Electronic Speed Control System is on.
not require towing.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
CAUTION!
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
monitors engine and automatic transmission condamage to the engine control system. It also could
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
condition checked promptly.
required.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

149

12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

11. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer 13. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
when the turn signal lever is operated.
mode to reset.

150

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.

15. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

151

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesIf the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
sary.
by an authorized dealer.

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate

152

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for Do In Emergencies” for further information.
further information.
18. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
17. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate and a
19. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiFurther overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
mately 15 seconds while the Vehicle Security
pass H , the indicator will continuously flash and a
Alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
until the vehicle is disarmed.
to cool.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
lights are on.
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

21. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.

153

is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
23. Airbag Warning Light
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
This light turns on and remains on for seven
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
further information.
22. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine

154

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

24. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.

26. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If
Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), when the appropriate conditions
exist, this display shows the EVIC messages. Refer to
25. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Button—If Equipped
Pushing this button will switch between the different On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini-Trip ComEVIC functions.
puter (CMTC) the display provides the outside temperature, one of eight compass headings to indicate the
Press the CMTC reset button to scroll through sub-menus
direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio
(i.e., Trip Functions: AVG Fuel Economy, DTE Elapsed
station. Refer to “Compass Mini-Trip Computer”.
Time, and Units).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
EQUIPPED

155

Compass Mini-Trip Computer Reset Button

CMTC Reset Button — Secondary Reset Button
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, Press the left Compass/Temperature RESET button to
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass. scroll through sub-menus (i.e., Trip Functions: AVG Fuel
Economy, DTE Elapsed Time, and Units (US or Metric).
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer features a driverinteractive display (displays information on outside tem- When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
perature, compass direction, and trip information). The messages will display in the window below the fuel and
display is located on the lower left part of the cluster engine temperature gauge:
below the fuel and engine temperature gauge.
E . . . . . . . . Eight-point compass headings are displayed
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to 14°F. . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera- AVG. . . . . . . . . . Average Fuel Economy (US or Metric)
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance to Empty
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed Time
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
NOTE: Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be
changed from U.S. or Metric. by pressing and holding the
(left) secondary pushbutton.

156

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
Compass Variance Map
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass To Set the Variance
Start the engine, and leave the transmission shift lever in
readings.
the PARK position. Press and hold (approximately ten
seconds) the compass/temperature RESET button until
the current variance zone number is displayed. To change

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

157

the zone, press and release the RESET button to incre- Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph
ment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary, until the (8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in a area free
from large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator in the
desired variance is achieved.
CMTC turns off. The compass will now function
NOTE: Zone 8 is the factory default. During programnormally.
ming, the Zone Number will wrap around from Zone 15
to 1. Please refer to the Compass Variance Zone Map in Manual Compass Calibration
the following section: “Electronic Vehicle Information If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manuCenter (EVIC)”
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
Automatic Compass Calibration
compass:
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass. When 1. Start the engine, and leave the transmission shift lever
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and in the PARK position.
the CAL indicator message will flash in the CMTC until
2. Press and hold (approximately 10 seconds) the
the calibration is complete.
Compass/Temperature RESET button until the current
A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi- variance zone number is displayed.
ronment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.

158

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3. Release the RESET button, then press and hold again These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
(approximately 10 seconds), until the direction is dis- the right reset button (on the instrument cluster).
played with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
Trip Odometer (ODO)
display.
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle reset. Press and release the right button (on the instruin one or more complete 360 degree circles, under 5 mph ment cluster) to switch from odometer, to trip A or trip B.
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large Press and hold the right button while the odometer/trip
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The odometer is displayed, to reset.
compass will now function normally.
Trip A
Odometer Display
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following reset.
odometer messages will display:
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
CRUISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Activated reset.
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED

159

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass heading
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

• Uconnect™ hands-free communication system displays — if equipped

NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, • Audio mode display
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.

160

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
the following messages:
chime, if speed is above 1 mph)
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
motion)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)

• Headlights On
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
• Key In Ignition
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single EVIC Functions
chime)
Press the EVIC button until one of the following functions are displayed on the EVIC:
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not In
(automatic transmission) or Vehicle Is In Motion • Average Fuel Economy
(manual transmission).
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
• Elapsed Time
chime, if speed is above 1 mph)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings

161

displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and
release the EVIC button a second time within three
seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function
(Reset ALL will be displayed during this three-second
window).
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature, and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to
“Personal
Settings
(Customer-Programmable
Features)”.

EVIC Button

Average Fuel Economy
To Reset the Display
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
resettable function currently being displayed. Reset will RESET, or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
only occur if a resettable function is currently being

162

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

history information will be erased, and the averaging will FUEL text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based
on the current values in the DTE calculation and the
continue from where it was before the reset.
current fuel tank level.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with Elapsed Time
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Compass Variance
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will condifferences and provide the most accurate compass headtinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a signifiing.
cant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

163

2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
you have displayed the Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features) menu.
3. Press and release the EVIC button until “Compass
Variance” and the current variance zone number displays
in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the EVIC button to increment the
variance zone by one, (one button press per update), until
the proper variance zone number is selected according to
the map.
Compass Variance Map

To Set the Variance
Follow this procedure to set the Variance:

NOTE: Zone 8 is the factory default. During programming, the Zone Number will wrap around from Zone 15
to 1.

5. Press and release the EVIC button to exit.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
shift lever in PARK.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to “Starting And Operating” “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS),” for system operation.

164

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
shift lever is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).

NOTE: Uconnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in
“Uconnect™ — If Equipped” for details.

Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
Press and release the EVIC button until “Personal Set- the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON
tings” is displayed in the EVIC.
or OFF appears, to make your selection.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
Auto Unlock On Exit
choices:
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
Language
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
When in this display you may select different languages
(manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped and the
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
shift lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL position (automatic
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
transmission). Press and hold the EVIC button when in
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais dependthis display until ON or OFF appears to make your
ing on availability. As you continue, the displayed inforselection.
mation will be shown in the selected language.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When Driver’s Door 1st is selected, only the driver’s door
will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. A second press is
required to unlock the remaining locked doors. When
Remote Unlock All Doors is selected, all doors will
unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until Driver’s Door 1st or All Doors appears, to
make your selection.

165

Flash Lights On Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn On Lock feature activated. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON
or OFF appears, to make your selection.

Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Sound Horn On Lock
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature your selection.
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights On
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
Lock/Unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
When this feature is selected, the power window
when in this display until ON or OFF appears, to make
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
your selection.
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned

166

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

OFF. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until US or METRIC appears, to make your selection.
OFF, 45 sec, 5 min, or 10 min appears, to make your
Automatic Compass Calibration
selection.
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminatTurn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock
ing the need to manually calibrate the compass. When
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are the CAL indicator message will flash in the EVIC until
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the the calibration is complete.
EVIC button when in this display until OFF, 30 sec,
A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi60 sec, or 90 sec appears, to make your selection.
ronment free from large metallic objects such as buildConfirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph
U-Connect威 system are confirmed. Press and hold the
(8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in an area free
EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF
from large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator in the
appears, to make your selection.
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and METRIC.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:
• A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.

167

2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
the EVIC displays the Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features) menu.

3. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed. A EVIC button
• Keep all magnetic objects, such as laptop computers, press (longer than two seconds) will place the compass in
iPod’s, cell phones and PDA’s (anything with a bat- calibration mode.
tery) away from the compass sensor which is located
in the top of the instrument panel. These devices can 4. The CAL indicator will come on continuously in the
EVIC display, to indicate that the compass is now in the
interfere with compass accuracy and performance.
calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven
Manual Compass Calibration
to calibrate. Press the EVIC button from the ⬙Calibrate
If the compass appears to be inaccurate, you may wish to
manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the Compass (Yes)⬙ screen to exit the EVIC Customercompass, make sure the proper Compass Variance Value Programmable features, and return it to its normal operis selected. (Refer to “Compass Variance” for additional ating mode.)
information). Then, continue to calibrate the compass as 5. Drive the vehicle slowly, under 5 mph (8 km/h),
follows:
completing one or more circles (in an area free from large
1. Start the engine and leave the shift lever in the PARK metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
position.

168

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first, and then
more quickly the longer the button is held.

SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE-DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL Uconnect™ Multimedia
(SATELLITE RADIO) AND Uconnect™ Phone
CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.

Setting The Analog Clock
REF Radio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

169

MODE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
Push the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Push the
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
Electronic Volume Control
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360– tuned to the new station until you make another selecdegrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
volume control to the right increases the volume and to stopping until you release it.
the left decreases it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. “MUTE” will display. Press the MUTE button a
set at the same volume level as last played.
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
but not up, when the audio system is OFF and the
or turning the ignition ON/OFF, will cancel the MUTE
ignition is ON.
feature.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

170

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: In Hands-Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the Clock Setting Procedure
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO conPressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
trol.
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at 3. After the hours are adjusted, press the TUNE/AUDIO
each listenable station before continuing to the next. To control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
blink.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display
for five seconds.

4. Adjust the minutes using the TUNE/AUDIO control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the Rewind/Fast Forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

171

Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and “BAL”
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM modes.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and “FADE”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control, and “BASS” will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or Press the TUNE control again or wait five seconds to exit
decrease the Bass tones.
setting tone, balance, and fade.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and “MID” RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To Set The
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
increase or decrease the Mid-Range tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and “TREB”
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
and press and release that button. If a button is not

172

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- Operating Instructions — CD Mode
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
stored into pushbutton memory.
position to operate the radio.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
the SET button twice and “SET 2” will show in the
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,
radio display.
12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored
into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
twice.
begin at the start of track one.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
NOTE:
button number will display.
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory, 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

173

• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio SCAN Button (CD Mode)
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
player.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.

EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
of the previous track if the CD is within the first
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
10 seconds of the current selection.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
for five seconds.
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition RW/FF (CD Mode)
OFF/ON will also return the sound from the speakers. Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Rewind) button works in a similar manner.

174

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will through the vehicle speakers.
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
3.5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate releases the MODE button until “AUX” appears on the
Random play. This feature plays the selections on the display.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
change of pace.
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posiPress the SEEK button to move to the next randomly tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
play.
Operating Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

175

second time and the sound from the speakers will return. RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition No function.
OFF/ON will also return the sound from the speakers.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
No function.
MODE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
No function.

PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Multimedia
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
Refer to the “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for further information.
for five seconds.

176

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:

ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD EJECT and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
Number (ESN/SID).
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
2. Credit card information.
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents. Please have the following information
available when activating your system:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.

177

Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist, press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.

Selecting a Channel
Press and hold SEEK to bypass stations or use the TUNE
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
knob to search for the next channel. Press the top of the
in REF, and RAQ, Radios
button to search up and the bottom of the button to
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
search down. Holding the TUNE button causes the radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙ to bypass channels until the button is released.
appears in the display.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
mode.
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before

178

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
appear in the display between each channel change. Press When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
next channel of the selected program type. Press the
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539⬙SCAN⬙ button a second time to stop the search.
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblockNOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
performing a music-type scan will change the channel by
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
button during a music-type scan, will call up the memory
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
channel and stop the search.
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your Satellite Antenna
radio.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
the antenna.

179

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Reception Quality
wiping from center to edge.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
cause intermittent reception.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can too high.
cause signal blockage.

180

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Control Operation
The Climate Control system allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located in the
center instrument panel, below the radio.

Climate Controls

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

181

NOTE: The air conditioning system of your vehicle Mode Control (Air Direction)
The Mode control allows you to
contains R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the
choose from several patterns of air
ozone layer in the upper atmosphere.
distribution. You can select either a
The controls are as follows:
primary mode, as identified by the
Fan Control
symbols, or a blend of two of these
Use the Fan control to regulate the
modes. The closer the control is to a
amount of air forced through the sysparticular mode, the more air distributem in any mode you select. The fan tion you receive from that mode
speed increases as you move the conPanel
trol to the right from the off position.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the fan control is left in the “O” (off) position.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer

182

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
the A/C button has not been pressed and the indicator
Floor
lamp is off. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
window demist outlets with a small amount
only when necessary.
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.

CAUTION!
If the Defroster is not working the windshield and
windows may become fogged, and your visibility
will be greatly diminished. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
airflow.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

183

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen- Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
Air Conditioning (A/C) — If Equipped
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
Press the A/C button to engage the air
the left rear passenger.
conditioning. A lamp will illuminate
Temperature Control
when the air conditioning system is
Use this control to regulate the temengaged
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
temperatures.
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.

184

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MAX A/C
To quickly cool the vehicle interior
follow the steps listed below:

1. Set the Temperature Control to Max Cool.
2. Set the Mode Control to Panel or Bi-Level.
3. Press the Recirculation button and the A/C button.
4. Adjust the Fan Control to desired airflow setting.

Circulation Control
Rotate this control to choose between
outside air intake or recirculation of
the air inside the vehicle. A lamp will
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation
mode to temporarily block out any
outside odors, smoke, or dust and to
cool the interior rapidly upon initial startup in very hot
or humid weather.
NOTE: Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
NOTE:
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of
• Recirculation Mode will not operate in Floor, Mix or moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For defogging, select
Defrost modes.
the Outside Air position.
• See “Circulation Control” in this section, for proper or NOTE: Recirculation mode will not operate in Floor,
extended use of this position.
Mix or Defrost modes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

185

Operating Tips

186

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Window Fogging
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the
A/C, Panel and Blower controls. Direct the panel outlets
toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

Summer Operation
Vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze
coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to
raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection
against overheating. A 50% concentration is
recommended.

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- Outside Air Intake
When operating the system, make sure the air intake,
moved by using the defrost position.
directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush,
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
snow or other obstructions such as leaves. Leaves colsurfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collectlected in the air-intake plenum may reduce airflow and
ing on the inside surface of the glass.
plug the plenum water drains.
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
vehicle operation.
defogging, use the Outside Air position.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

187

Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 195

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 196

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

▫ If The Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

190

STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 218

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 219

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

䡵 Tires — General Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 231

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

䡵 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 232

䡵 Traction Control System — If Equipped . . . . . . 212
䡵 Tire Safety Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 217

▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 243

191

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

䡵 Vehicle Loading

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

192

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both out of PARK.
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
WARNING!
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a and release when the engine starts. If the engine has not
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- started within three seconds, slightly press the acceleraously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the tor pedal while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to
ignition. A child could operate power windows, start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
other controls, or move the vehicle.
“Normal Starting” procedure above.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
and press the shift lever knob button before shifting to
any driving gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if
done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully.
Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What to Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

193

If The Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the ON position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.

194

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only move the shift lever
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
You must step on the brake pedal and press the shift lever
knob button before you will be able to shift out of PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must step on the brake pedal and press the
shift lever knob button before you will be able to move
the shift lever out of PARK.

195

Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever
is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position. Always step on the
brake pedal and press the shift lever knob button
before shifting out of PARK.

196

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will function
normally, except you may be able to shift the vehicle from
PARK, without pressing the brake pedal. If this occurs
obtain service from an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift lever knob
pushbutton is out. It also prevents moving the shift lever
out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position,
and the brake pedal is pressed.

Four-Speed Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the shift cycles.
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.

STARTING AND OPERATING

RESET Mode
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission shifts automatically into second gear. The transmission remains in second gear
despite the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL will continue to operate. This second gear
limp-in feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.

197

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.

PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears:
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
1. Stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK. the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, and then move the
2. Turn the ignition to OFF then restart the engine.
shift lever into the PARK position.
3. Move the shift lever into DRIVE and resume driving.
4. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.

198

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key
is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked
in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never
leave unattended children inside a vehicle.

• Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the PARK position.
• When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
the shift lever rearward without pressing the lever
knob button.

CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
turn the ignition from LOCK to ON, so the steering
wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, damage to the steering column or shift lever could result.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that REVERSE
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
• When moving the shift lever into PARK, press the
stop.
button on the shift lever knob and firmly move the
lever all the way forward until it stops.

STARTING AND OPERATING

NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.

199

When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
the DRIVE/OVERDRIVE range, such as when operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly
terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
trailers), use third gear.
DRIVE — 3rd
This range eliminates shifts into OVERDRIVE. The transmission will operate normally in first and second gear
while in this range.
NOTE: Using third gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance, fuel economy, and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.

DRIVE/OVERDRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway Use third gear when descending steep grades to prevent
driving. It provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts, brake system distress.
and best fuel economy.

200

STARTING AND OPERATING

LOW — 1st
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
shifts from second to first gear will occur as early as
possible.

you move the shift lever into the AutoStick威 position, it
can be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the
left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the gear display,
located in the instrument cluster.

NOTE:
•
In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only shift
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
up and down when the driver manually moves the
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
shift lever right (D+) or left (D-).
manual gear-shifting capability to provide you with more
control. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine brak- • An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the inimprove overall vehicle performance. This system can
strument cluster. This message appears in order to
also provide you with more control during passing, city
alert the driver to upshift to the next gear. The
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
UPSHIFT message will display while operating the
trailer towing, and many other situations.
vehicle at higher engine revolutions per minute
(RPM).
Operation
The AutoStick威 position is just below the OVERDRIVE
position and is identified by the word “AutoStick”. When

STARTING AND OPERATING

201

You can move the shift lever in or out of the AutoStick威 • The transmission will automatically upshift from first
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
to second gear and from second to third gear when
accelerator pedal. If you choose the OVERDRIVE mode,
engine speed reaches about 6,300 RPM.
the transmission will operate automatically; shifting be• Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
tween the four available gears. When you wish to engage
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above
AutoStick威, simply move the shift lever to the AutoStick威
41 mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
position. The transmission will remain in the current gear
• Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
conditions.
Move the shift lever back to the OVERDRIVE position to
• While in the AutoStick威 mode, the Electronic Speed
shift out of the AutoStick威 mode.
Control will only function in third or fourth gear.
General Information
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
• You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
control.
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). The system will ignore • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to 1st
gear when coming to a stop.

202

STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.

STARTING AND OPERATING

203

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.

WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.

204

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.

205

POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

206

STARTING AND OPERATING

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticidoes not in any way damage the steering system.
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoWARNING!
rized dealer.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.

STARTING AND OPERATING

207

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
Parking Brake
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
When
the
parking
brake
is applied with the ignition
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
switch
ON,
the
“Brake
Warning
Light” in the instrument
completely.
cluster will illuminate.

208

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.

209

with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system operating.

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some
BRAKE SYSTEM
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
Your vehicle is equipped with power-assisted brakes as
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
standard equipment. In the event power-assist is lost for
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications

210

STARTING AND OPERATING

malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning
Light” will illuminate.

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.

WARNING!
• Pumping of the ABS will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes
the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on
your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

211

brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Light”
remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Systems are not functionThe ABS Telltale Light monitors the Anti-Lock ing properly. Immediate repair to the ABS system at an
Brake System. The light will come on when the authorized dealer is required.
ignition switch is turned to the ON position When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some

If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on.

related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inas soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.

212

STARTING AND OPERATING

You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• Brake pedal pulsations,
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly-installed or high-output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
dealership professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Traction Control System (TCS) will improve acceleration and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire
spin. The system reduces wheel slip and maintains
traction at the driving (front) wheels by engaging the
brake on the wheel that is losing traction. When this

STARTING AND OPERATING

213

occurs the “TCS Indicator Light” located above the • There is a Traction Control System malfunction;
instrument cluster odometer will flash. The system oper• The system has been automatically deactivated to
ates at speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated
brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the “TCS
Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
A pushbutton at the center of the instrument panel, about four minutes until the brakes have cooled. The
below the radio, turns the Traction Control System ON or system will automatically reactivate and turn off the
OFF.
“TCS Indicator Light.”
TCS OFF Switch

The system is always in the “ON” mode unless:

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
• The TCS OFF switch has been used to turn the system the Traction Control System off before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free.
off;
• There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction;

214

STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings

NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

STARTING AND OPERATING

215

Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designastandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

216

STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

217

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

218

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar

Cold Tire Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

219

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.

5
Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.

220

STARTING AND OPERATING

Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

STARTING AND OPERATING

221

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs NOTE:
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
[295 kg]).
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
calculated in Step 4.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
(392 kg).
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

222

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety,
Economy, and Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability.

223

Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)

224

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

225

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.

226

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High-speed driving with your vehicle under maxiCompact Spare Tire – If Equipped
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein75 mph (120 km/h).
stalled at the first opportunity.

STARTING AND OPERATING

227

WARNING!

CAUTION!

Temporary-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary-use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.

Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a stopping when you are stuck.
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Emergencies” for further information.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.

228

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 — Worn Tire
to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 — New Tire
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

STARTING AND OPERATING

229

Life Of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors including, but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
• Distance driven
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
You could lose control and have an accident resulting that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
in serious injury or death.
specifications or capability.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.

230

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

STARTING AND OPERATING

231

TIRE CHAINS
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom- was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
mended.
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).

CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.

SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
designation on the tire sidewall.
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only smooth, quiet ride.
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.

232

STARTING AND OPERATING

Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte- TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if The TPMS will warn you of a low tire pressure based on
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
diagram.
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation

STARTING AND OPERATING

TPMS will warn you of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
TPMS will continue to warn you of low tire pressure as
long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the
tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale
Light will turn off once the system receives the updated
tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.

233

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPMS
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

234

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

NOTE:
• TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Telltale Light.

STARTING AND OPERATING

235

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Telltale Light will illuminate in the
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
the tire.
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
Base System
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rimsoon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levon your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
Module.
will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale Light
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to perform a will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
monthly tire pressure check on, and to maintain the 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
proper pressure of all the tires on your vehicle.
TPMS to receive this information.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Check TPMS Warning
The TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Telltale Light

236

STARTING AND OPERATING

will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn ON due to
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies (RF)
the low tire.
as the TPMS sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on
materials that may block radio wave signals.
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
3. Excessive accumulation of snow or ice around the
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
wheels or wheel housings.
sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS Sensors. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
NOTE:
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is
TPMS Sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
pressure in the compact spare tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING

237

active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for FUEL REQUIREMENTS
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
2.4L Engine
TPMS to receive this information.
2.4L engines are designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excellent fuel
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
economy and performance when using
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
high quality unleaded “regular” gasolines
following conditions:
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline
• This device must accept any interference received, will not provide a benefit over high quality unleaded
including interference that may cause undesired “regular” gasolines, and in some circumstances may
operation.
result in poorer performance.
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
following licenses:
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are speCanada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

238

STARTING AND OPERATING

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.

Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85
Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol,
it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

STARTING AND OPERATING

239

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer if that gasoline
E-85 perform the following:
contains MMT.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
• change the engine oil and oil filter
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the higher than those allowed in the United States.
engine controller memory
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformuMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged lated gasolines.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
Materials Added to Fuel
MMT In Gasoline
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num- detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT

240

STARTING AND OPERATING

Fuel System Cautions
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:

CAUTION!
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your dealer for service assistance.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

241

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2 in
(50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable container,
it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open
the restricting door.

242

STARTING AND OPERATING

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

CAUTION! (Continued)

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE:
• When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in
the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement.

• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

• If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.

• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
(Continued)

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so will cause the malfunction
indicator light to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in the
instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.

243

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the Odometer/
Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

244

STARTING AND OPERATING

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Vehicle Certification Label
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.

245

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.

Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
Overloading
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels, vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as operate.
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.

246

STARTING AND OPERATING

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
supported by the scale.
and recommendations in this manual concerning veGross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
hicles used for trailer towing.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
Common Towing Definitions
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes an 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
exceed the GVWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted
on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not
be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.

247

Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.

248

STARTING AND OPERATING

Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weightdistributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier tongue weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading to
comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements.

WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compatible with
surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer
manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer
for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer
service center for package content.

STARTING AND OPERATING

The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.

249

TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS
Max.
Class
GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)

Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.

250

STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Towing Weights
Max. GTW
Max. Tongue Wt.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
(See Note)
2.4L/Automatic
20 sq ft (1.9 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
110 lbs (50 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
“Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side,

which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

STARTING AND OPERATING

251

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Consider the following items when computing the
Towing Requirements
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive• The tongue weight of the trailer.
train components, the following guidelines are recommended.

252

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR ratings. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the

STARTING AND OPERATING

frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.

253

always achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)

Towing Requirements – Tires
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
spare tire.
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
“Tires-General Information” in “Starting and Operat• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
ing” for proper tire inflation procedures.
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation presratings are not exceeded:
sures before trailer usage.
1. GVWR
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires-General Infor2. GTW
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper
3. GAWR
inspection procedure.
4. TW (Trailer Tongue Weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized. This requirement may limit the ability to

254

STARTING AND OPERATING

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires-General Informa- • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
tion” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
CAUTION!
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.

255

Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four–or seven-pin
connector wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.

256

STARTING AND OPERATING

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.

Seven-Pin Connector

Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground

4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn

1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes

5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps

STARTING AND OPERATING

257

45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “MainteTowing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
traffic.
before towing.
Automatic Transmission
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
The OVERDRIVE/DRIVE gear range can be selected
when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
in this range, third gear should be selected.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
NOTE: Using the third gear range while operating the
you can get back to cruising speed.
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
maximize fuel efficiency.
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than

258

STARTING AND OPERATING

Cooling System
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- MOTORHOME, ETC.)
heating, take the following actions:
Automatic Transmission
• City Driving
CAUTION!
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle
Recreational towing on vehicle’s equipped with a
speed.
automatic transmission is not recommended.
• Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
• Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

▫ Towing With The Key-In-Ignition . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

▫ Towing Without The Key-In-Ignition . . . . . . . 274

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

260

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — Slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer of the Coolant Temperature Gage rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Turn off the air conditioning and
wait until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for
more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

261

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Cooling System Pressure
Cap” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” and follow the
warnings under the paragraph.

262

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed behind the right rear
side trim panel in the cargo area.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.

Jack Storage

Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a hook/basket mechanism. To remove or stow the compact spare, use the jack handle to
rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area, just
inside the liftgate opening.

263

Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the cover and fit the jack-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the
swivel hook from the stowage basket. Swing the basket
down to remove the compact spare tire.

CAUTION!
The hook is designed for use with the jack handle
only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.

Spare Tire Storage

264

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transaxle) or
REVERSE (manual transaxle).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jacking Instructions

265

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly, and shift a automatic
transmission into PARK; a manual transmission
into REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
(Continued)

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

Jack Warning Label

266

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the 2. There are two jacking locations on each side of the
body, one at the front of the vehicle and one in the rear on
stowage bag.
the trailing arm bracket under the triangular cut out
NOTE: If equipped with a center cap that covers the
symbol. Turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
wheel nuts, pry off the cap using the small end of the lug
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wrench. To reinstall the cap, make sure it is properly
wheel to be changed.
lined up before pushing it onto the wheel.
Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the
cross-member below the radiator, on the front suspension cross-member, or on the rear axle assembly.

Front Jacking Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

267

tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
4. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
Rear Jacking Location
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
securely engaged.
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
3. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the

268

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.

7. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Stow the lug wrench, and jack in their designated
location. Secure all parts using the means provided.

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.

5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
6. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut
torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a qualified
service station.

8. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
9. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. The correct
pressure as required.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

269

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Preparations for Jump-Start
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly The battery in your vehicle is located in the engine
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. compartment just behind the left front headlight assembly.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Battery Connections
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Ground Location (Stud on Hood Safety Latch)

270

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

271

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.

Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the stud
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
on the hood latch assembly (-) of the vehicle with the
cable to the stud on the hood latch assembly (-) of the
discharged battery.
vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

272

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the
vehicle.
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
you should have the battery and charging system in- can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
spected at your authorized dealer.
front wheels. Then shift back-and-forth between RECAUTION!
VERSE and DRIVE (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
and 1st gear (manual transaxle). Using, the least accelAccessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
erator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
without spinning the wheels is most effective.
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h).

273

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing With The Key-In-Ignition
Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The steering column must be unlocked and the
shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be
towed must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h). If the
transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed
more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to
the transaxle.
Manual Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed in a forward direction, with
all four wheels on the ground, and the shift lever in the
NEUTRAL position. If the transaxle is not operative, the
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the
ground.

274

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

All Transaxles

CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC position, not in
the LOCK position.
Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach it to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from
improper towing.

Towing Without The Key-In-Ignition
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing with
all four wheels on the ground)
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed in a forward direction, at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the transaxle is in
NEUTRAL.

If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed If the ignition key is not available, vehicles with auto(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time.
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L

. . . . . . . . . . . . 277

䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

䡵 Dealer Service

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

. . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

䡵 Maintenance Procedures
▫ Engine Oil

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

. . . . . 278

䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
䡵 Replacement Parts

▫ Engine Oil Filter

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance
▫ Body Lubrication

. . . . . . . . . . . 287

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades
▫ Adding Washer Fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

▫ Exhaust System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

▫ Cooling System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

276

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Brake System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

▫ Automatic Transmission

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
䡵 Fuses

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM)
䡵 Vehicle Storage

. . . . . . . . . 308

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ Front Fog Lamps – If Equipped

. . . . . . . . . 314

▫ Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps
▫ Backup Lamps

. . . 314

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
䡵 Fluid Capacities

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts

. . . . . . 317

䡵 Replacement Bulbs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

䡵 Bulb Replacement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

▫ Chassis

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

▫ Headlamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

▫ Front Parking, Turn Signal, And Side Marker
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

277

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

7
1
2
3
4
5
6

— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Power Distribution Center
— Air Cleaner Filter

7 — Battery
8 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Engine Oil Fill
11 — Coolant Pressure Cap

278

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
light off.
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). OBD
II will also store diagnostic codes and other information EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
to assist an authorized service technician in making PROGRAMS
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
service as soon as possible.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
For states that require an Inspection and MainteAfter fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

279

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
ready for testing.
a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacea. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
not proceed to the I/M station.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
do the following:
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
crank or start the engine.
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

280

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.

DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
attempting any procedure yourself.
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.

281

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
(Continued) regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

282

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.

Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.

• Stop and go driving.

CAUTION!
Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level
above the “MAX” mark on the engine oil dipstick
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.

• Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-road or desert operation.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

283

• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months, Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
whichever comes first, and follow “Maintenance Schedbeen certified by the American
ule B.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
Petroleum Institute (API). The
information.
manufacturer only recommends
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
API Certified engine oils.
at every interval shown on “Maintenance Schedule A.”
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.

CAUTION!

Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

284

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.

Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
additives.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
tion.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certienvironment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numstation, or governmental agency for advice on how and
ber, should not be used.
where they can be safely discarded in your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the recomThe engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomat every engine oil change.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil Filter Selection
This engine has a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use
a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high-quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high-quality oil filters and
are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on “Maintenance Schedule A”. If, however, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or
severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected
periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals
shown on “Maintenance Schedule B”.

285

WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high-quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high-quality filter and are
recommended.

286

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

287

Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

288

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.

Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro- grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental removed. Particular attention should also be given to

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner, or use the washer solvent.
This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road
film and help reduce streaking and smearing.

289

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. To avoid damaging the blades, make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on. Keep the blade rubber out
of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
Adding Washer Fluid
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.

290

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.

exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex- catalyst as an emissions control device.
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

291

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure against you.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
WARNING!
damage.

CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

292

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for a prolonged period.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
Cooling System
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
WARNING!
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anticonnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
controlled and can start at any time the ignition spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
switch is in the ON position.
face of the condenser.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

293

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)

294

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
Adding Coolant
anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionintervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintewill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine cooling system.
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainvehicle.
tain the proper level of protection against freezing acPlease review these recommendations for using Hybrid cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant the vehicle is operated.
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

295

WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

296

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by humans and animals, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.

CAUTION!
If ethylene glycol engine coolant (antifreeze) is ingested by anyone, contact a physician immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the

engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

297

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporand distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points to Remember

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.

298

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the
master cylinder area before removing the cap. With disc
brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

299

WARNING! (Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.

(Continued)

Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.

300

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
Fluid Level Check
Use the following procedure to check the automatic comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
transmission fluid level properly:
temperature below 80°F (27°C).
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position, ending with the shift lever in PARK.

7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”

5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot overfill.
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause
serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.

301

Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Maintenance Schedule A — No change necessary.
Maintenance Schedule B — Every 60,000 miles
(100 000 km) change fluid and filter under the following
conditions:
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this

302

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
they may adversely affect seals.
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation,
• Stone and gravel impact,
• Insects, tree sap and tar,
• Salt in the air near sea coast localities, and

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.

303

CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.

• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
Special Care
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 • If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains,
a month.
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels be kept clear and open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
finish.
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
scratch the paint.

304

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
finish.
packaged and sealed.
Instrument Panel Cover
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on use protectants or other products, which may cause
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
has touch up-paint to match the color of your vehicle. restore the low glare surface.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

305

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- upholstery and carpeting.
ner:
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivawith a clean, dry towel.
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or clean vinyl upholstery.
equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
Use MOPAR威 Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent to clean vinyl
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
upholstery and trim.
remove soap residue.
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomCleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
mended for leather upholstery.
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
protectants on Stain Repel products.

306

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive-type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters, or the right rear
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

307

scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, 2. Dry with a soft tissue.
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
Seat Belt Maintenance
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
use protectants or other products which may cause
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
wash them.
restore the low glare surface.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
buckles do not work properly.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Dry with a soft tissue.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.

308

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FUSES
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses.

Cavity
1
2

3
4
5
6

7
8
Integrated Power Module

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini-Fuse

Description

EMPTY
20 Amp Yellow AWD ECU
Feed — If
Equipped
10 Amp Red
CHMSL Brake
Switch Feed
10 Amp Red
Ignition Switch
Feed
20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow
10 Amp Red
IOD Sw/Pwr
Mir/Ocm Steering Cntrl Sdar/
Hfm
30 Amp Green IOD Sense1
30 Amp Green IOD Sense2

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
9

Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

50 Amp
Red

Mini-Fuse

Description
Power Seats

20 Amp Yellow CCN Feed,
Power Locks
15 Amp Lt Blue Power Outlet
20 Amp Yellow Ign Run/Acc
Inverter
20 Amp Yellow Pwr Run/Acc
Outlet RR
10 Amp Red
IOD CCN/ Interior Lighting
RAD Fan Relay
Battery Feed
15 Amp Lt.
IGN Run/Acc
Blue
Cigar Ltr/
Sunroof

Cavity

Cartridge
Fuse

18
19
20
21
22

Mini-Fuse

309

Description

10 Amp Red

40 Amp
Green

IOD Feed CVT
Mod/Mod_
Wcm
ASD Relay
Contact Feed
20 Amp Yellow PWR Amp 1 &
Amp 2 Feed
15 Amp Lt.
IOD Feed RaBlue
dio
10 Amp Red
IOD Feed Intrus Mod/Siren
10 Amp Red
IGN RUN
Hvac/Compass
Sensor
15 Amp Lt.
ENG ASD ReBlue
lay Feed 3

310

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
24
25
26
27
28

29
30
31

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini-Fuse
25 Amp
ral
10 Amp
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp

Natu-

Description

PWR Sunroof
Feed
Red
Heated Mirror
Lt.
ENG ASD Relay Feed 2
Red
IGN RUN Only
ORC Feed
10 Amp Red
IGN RUN
ORC/OCM
Feed
EMPTY
20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats
10 Amp Red
Headlamp
Washer Relay
Control

Cavity
32

Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink

34
35
36

Mini-Fuse

10 Amp Red

30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp Natural

Description
ENG ASD Control Feed 1
ABS MOD/
J1962 Conn/
PCM
ABS Valve Feed
ABS Pump
Feed
Headlamp
Washer Relay
Contact Feed
Spare

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.

311

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb No.
Center Console Floor Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6233137
Console Gear Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194
Dome Lamp (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T579
Instrument Cluster Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Overhead Reading Lamp (Overhead Console). . . T1037
Overhead Reading Lamp (Rearview Mirror) . . . . . T192
Rear Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T906
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966

312

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

All the interior bulbs are brass or glass wedge base. BULB REPLACEMENT
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
Headlamps
be used for replacement.

CAUTION!

LIGHTS BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006XS Do not touch the new headlamp bulb with your
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005XS fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life.
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker
Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4157NAKX
Front Fog Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145 1. Remove the headlamp access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921–W16W
2. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
Rear Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157-P27/7W
License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

313

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Rotate the socket to the left one-quarter turn, and
replace the bulb.
3. Rotate the socket to the left one-quarter turn, and
replace the bulb.
Front Parking, Turn Signal, and Side Marker
Lamps
1. Remove the headlamp access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.

314

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Fog Lamps – If Equipped
1. Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash
shield to gain access to the fog lamp.
2. Twist and remove the bulb from the fog lamp housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
Rear Tail, Stop and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Remove the screw attaching the tail lamp housing and
remove the housing from the vehicle.
2. Twist the bulb socket one–quarter turn to remove it
from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Backup Lamps

315

2. Fully compress the clip to get the lamp to come out
completely.

1. To remove the backup lamp, you must take a fiber
stick and slide it along the inboard side of the lamp and 3. Remove the socket from the housing.
compress a spring clip to allow it to partially ⬙pop⬙ out to
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
the secondary catch.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

1. Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL
cover.
2. Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching
the two side latches.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.

316

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

U.S.
15 Gallons

Metric
56.7 Liters

5 Quarts

4.7 Liters

6.5 Quarts

6.2 Liters

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

317

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine
Fuel Selection

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Champion威 RE16MC (Gap 0.040 in [1.02 mm])
87 Octane

318

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.

䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 320

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ At Each Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 E

䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

▫ Maintenance Schedule B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 S

▫ At Each Stop For Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

▫ Maintenance Schedule A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 H

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS

▫ Once a Month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

320

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are three maintenance schedules that show required service for your vehicle.
First is “Maintenance Schedule B.” It is for vehicles that
are operated under the conditions that are listed below
and at the beginning of the schedule.
• Day and night temperatures are below 32°F(0°C).
• Stop and go driving.

• Extensive engine idling.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
• Driving in dusty conditions.
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis- • Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
• More than 50 percent of your driving is at sustained
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F(32°C).
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor- • Trailer towing.†〫
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

321 M

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- Second is “Maintenance Schedule A.” It is for vehicles
that are not operated under any of the conditions listed
vice).†〫
under “Maintenance Schedule B.”
• Off-road or desert operation.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
NOTE:
• If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine
CAUTION!
oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first, and follow “Maintenance
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
Schedule B” in this section.
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and replace
the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or At Each Stop for Fuel
60 months, whichever comes first, and follow “Main• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
tenance Schedule B” in this section.
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
• Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
for “Maintenance Schedule B.”
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

322

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if At Each Oil Change
required.
• Change the engine oil filter.
Once a Month
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
• Inspect the brake hoses.
damage.
• Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
nents.
as required.
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and transmission, and add as needed. • Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.

S
C
H
E
D
U • Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
L
operation.
E
S • Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for

proper fit.

Maintenance Schedule B
Follow “Maintenance Schedule B” if you usually operate
your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

323 M

Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every • If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
NOTE:
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
• If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine
with an 〫.
oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
• Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
whichever comes first, and follow ’Maintenance
Schedule B” in this section.
• Stop and go driving.
• If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and replace
• Extensive engine idling.
the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or
• Driving in dusty conditions.
60 months, whichever comes first, and follow “Maintenance Schedule B” in this section.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
at every interval shown on “Maintenance Schedule A” in
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
this section.
• Trailer towing.†〫
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).†〫
• Off-road or desert operation.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 324 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Miles
N
T (Kilometers)
E Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
N replaced at three months.
A
N Rotate tires.
C Inspect the brake linings.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary. *
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as necessary.*

3,000
(5 000)
X

6,000
(10 000)
X
X

9,000
(15 000)
X

12,000
(20 000)
X

15,000
(25 000)
X

X
X

18,000
(30 000)
X
X

X
X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.*
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the make-up air filter.*
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.

21,000
(35 000)
X

24,000
(40 000)
X
X
X

27,000
(45 000)
X

30,000
(50 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

33,000
(55 000)
X

325 M

36,000
(60 000)
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 326 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Miles
N
T (Kilometers)
E Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
N replaced at three months.
A
N Rotate tires.
C Inspect the brake linings.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as necessary.*

39,000
(65 000)
X

42,000
(70 000)
X

45,000
(75 000)
X

48,000
(80 000)
X
X
X
X

X
X

51,000
(85 000)
X

54,000
(90 000)
X
X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.*
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seal.
Replace the make-up air filter.*
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.〫
Flush and replace engine coolant at
60 months, if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).

57,000
(95 000)
X

60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
(100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

327 M

72,000
(120 000)
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 328 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Miles
N
T (Kilometers)
E Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reN placed at three months.
A
N Rotate tires.
C Inspect the brake linings.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as necessary.*
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.*
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.*
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as necessary.*
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Replace the make-up air filter.*

75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
90,000
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at three months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Change the brake fluid if your vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace as
necessary.*
Replace the engine timing belt.*
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not replaced at 60 months.
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as necessary.*

93,000
(155 000)
X

96,000
(160 000)
X
X
X
X

99,000
(165 000)
X

102,000
(170 000)
X

329 M

105,000
(175 000)
X

X
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 330 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Miles
N
T (Kilometers)
E Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reN placed at three months.
A
N Rotate tires.
C Inspect the brake linings.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.*
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the make-up air filter.*
Replace the generator belt.
Replace the power steering/air conditioning belt.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.〫
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles
(200 000 km).
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.

108,000
(180 000)
X
X
X

111,000
(185 000)
X

114,000
(190 000)
X
X

117,000
(195 000)
X

120,000
(200 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at three months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace as
necessary.*

123,000
(205 000)
X
X

126,000
(210 000)
X

129,000
(215 000)
X
X
X

132,000
(220 000)
X

331 M

135,000
(225 000)
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 332 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Miles
N (Kilometers)
T
E Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reN placed at three months.
A Rotate tires.
N
C Inspect the brake linings.
E Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with

four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.*
Adjust the generator belt tension.
Replace the spark plugs.
Replace the make-up air filter.*

138,000
(230 000)
X

S
C
H
E
D
U
L * This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
E
S to the owner, but is not required to maintain the emis-

sions warranty.

141,000
(235 000)
X

144,000
(240 000)
X

147,000
(245 000)
X

150,000
(250 000)
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
〫 This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine-type operation, or trailer towing.

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced. a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
† This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine-type operation, or trailer towing.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

333 M

Maintenance Schedule A
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.*
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the make-up air filter.*
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.

6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X

12,000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X

18,000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
X

24,000
(40 000)
[24]
X
X

30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

36,000
(60 000)
[36]
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 334 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Miles
N
T (Kilometers)
E [Months]
N
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N Rotate tires.
C
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.*
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months,
if not done at 102,000 miles (200 000 km)
Replace the make-up air filter.*
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.

42,000
(70 000)
[42]
X
X

48,000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X

54,000
(90 000)
[54]
X
X
X

60,000
(100 000)
[60]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

66,000
(110 000)
[66]
X
X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.*
Replace the spark plugs.
Replace the engine timing belt.*
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve, replace if necessary.*
Replace the make-up air filter.*
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not
replaced at 60 months.

72,000
(120 000)
[72]
X
X
X

78,000
84,000
90,000
(130 000) (140 000) (150 000)
[78]
[84]
[90]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

96,000
(160 000)
[96]
X
X

335 M

102,000
(170 000)
[102]
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
X

M 336 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Miles
N
T (Kilometers)
E [Months]
N
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N Rotate tires.
C
E Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

with four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the air cleaner filter.*
Replace the generator belt.
Replace power steering/air conditioning belt.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months, if not done at 102,000 miles
(200 000 kg).
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Replace the make-up air filter.*

108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
(180 000) (190 000) (200 000) (210 000) (220 000) (230 000)
[108]
[114]
[120]
[126]
[132]
[138]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the spark plugs.
Adjust the generator belt tension.
Replace the air cleaner filter.*
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.

144,000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X

337 M

150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
X
X

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 341

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

䡵 If You Need Assistance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 342

▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 342
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

340

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

341

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE

342

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be reChrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 247–9753
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center.
Phone: (800) 465–2001
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
ter should include the following information:
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner’s name and address
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

343

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-4852001).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

344

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.

345

Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, MasTo contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are acHotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: for an order form.
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
http://www.safercar.gov.
• Service Manuals
In Canada
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
information that students and professional technicians
should contact the Customer Service Department immeneed in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the

346

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.

vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.

Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the The following tire grading categories were established by
assistance of service and engineering specialists to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

• Owner’s Manuals

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

347

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
your vehicle.
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforAll passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
mance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
Traction Grades
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

348

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

350

INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 294
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 285
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287,288
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,287
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,75,153
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,52,57
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 293,316,317
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,29
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,192,194,299
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,196
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

INDEX

351

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,312
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,311
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,298
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 72

Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,162,167
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 316
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,284
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,241
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

352

INDEX

Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,278
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,170
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,155,157,162
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,162,167

Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,317
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 295
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,296
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

INDEX

353

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,182 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . 112
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,159
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Emergency, In Case of
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . 98
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 278,320
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

354

INDEX

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,241
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,316,317
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,284
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 58
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,74,241,290
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,290
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,242
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284,317
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,149
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,152
Folding Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,317
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,242
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Requirements . . .
Tank Capacity . .
Fuel System Caution
Fueling . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .

...
...
..
...
...

.
.
.
.
.

INDEX

355

.
.
.
.
.

237
316
242
241
308

.
.
.
.
.

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,243,278
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,316
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,25,237
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

356

INDEX

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244,246
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,19
Hazard
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,143
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304,307
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 115 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,265
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

INDEX

357

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,101
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,75,153
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103,152,314
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,311,312

358

INDEX

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 148
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,152
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 148
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 144,232
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,104,313
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 143
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244,245
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule
Schedule “A”-Non Turbo . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule “B”-All Engines . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . 286
. . . . . 281
. . . . . 281
. . . . . 333
. . . . . 322
. . . . . 322
. . . . . 320
. . 148,278
. . . . . 345

INDEX

359

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,149
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,316
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,316
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,344
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,59 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,49,52 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

360

INDEX

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,260 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,345 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Panel Rear Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Programming Transmitters
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,23 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 295
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,180
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 219 Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 123 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,93
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Rear Seat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206 Rear Shelf Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

INDEX

361

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 43
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,70
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

362

INDEX

Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) . . . . . . . . 98
Folding Front Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,93
Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tumbling Rear (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,19
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,170
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Severe Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 187
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,104,149
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,263
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 112,148
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

INDEX

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,311
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 46
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 143,261
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

363

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 219
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,223,346
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,220
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

364

INDEX

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,223
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,192,194,299
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 115

INDEX

Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Tumbling Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,149
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 140
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Vehicle
Vehicle
Vehicle
Vehicle
Vehicle

365

Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220,244,245
Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18

Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,109
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,123
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

366

INDEX

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,109,289 Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,289

Chrysler Group LLC
10PT44-126-AC

3rd Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c321 44.398116, Tue Aug 04 2009 14:24:39
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2010 Chrysler PT Cruiser Owner's Manual
Description                     : 3rd Edition
Creator                         : 10PT44-126-AC
Subject                         : 273307
Create Date                     : 2010:01:27 09:00:41Z
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2010:01:27 09:56-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:01:27 09:56-05:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.2.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:d25fa565-c378-49ac-a68a-051968e16274
Instance ID                     : uuid:84391ffd-3bec-4139-8bde-f81379837a90
Page Count                      : 368
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : 10PT44-126-AC
Keywords                        : 273307

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2010 Chrysler PT Cruiser Owner's Manual Owners OM 3rd

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation